JP2020151197A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the game amusement when, in a special state, more game value is given in a particular state.SOLUTION: When controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in a special state (for example, a second KT state (a high probability/low base state)), a performance can be executed with a pattern of either of a first pattern in which a performance identical or similar to a performance in the special state is executed, or a second pattern in which an advantageous state performance not executed in the special state is executed. In addition, the performance can be executed with a pattern of either of the first pattern or the second pattern in accordance with a ratio varying according to a game value given in the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure9-63

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or a state advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaled or deformed, multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control a special state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the special state (small hit gaming state) is set rather than the non-special state. There is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be controllable in a special state that is frequently controlled, and in the special state, there is one that gives a game value by a special state (small hit game state) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-156952 (paragraph 0044)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the period in which the gaming value is given by the special state and the effect in the advantageous state controlled in that period.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment in the case where the game value is given by the special state in the special state.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is different from the advantageous state. A special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps S126 to S128) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a non-special state. A special state that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). Control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 006IWS2204 to S2209) and advantageous state-corresponding effect execution that can execute an effect (for example, a big hit medium effect) based on being controlled to an advantageous state. A means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step S176) is provided, and the advantageous state corresponding effect executing means produces the same or similar effect as in the special state when controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. The effect is executed by one of the first pattern to be executed (see FIG. 9-58) and the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57) to execute the effect in the advantageous state which is not executed in the special state. It is possible, and the effect can be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different ratio depending on the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state (). For example, in the second modification, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 006IWS504D and S505). According to such a configuration, in the special state, the game entertainment can be improved when the game value is given by the special state.

(Means 2) In the means 1, when the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is small, the advantageous state corresponding effect executing means executes the effect according to the first pattern at a high rate (for example). As shown in FIG. 9-63 of the second modification, the smaller the number of prize balls from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot game state, the higher the ratio of determining the first pattern). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the special state is controlled but the advantageous state is controlled in a short period of time.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, when the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is large, the advantageous state corresponding effect executing means executes the effect by the second pattern at a high rate. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-63 of Modification 2, the larger the number of prize balls from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot game state, the higher the ratio of determining the second pattern. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the game is controlled to the game state after obtaining a sufficient game value in the special state.

(Means 4) A notification effect execution means (for example, a one-shot notification effect) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a one-shot notification effect) for notifying that the means 1 to the means 3 are controlled to an advantageous state in a special state. A portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 006IWS8109), and the notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the effect is executed by the second pattern, and the effect is executed by the first pattern. The execution of the notification effect may be restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute steps 006IWS522 to S528). According to such a configuration, when the game value is given by the special state in the special state, the effect executed by the first pattern can be emphasized, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Means 5) In any of means 1 to means 4, a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to (for example, a closed state) is provided, and the advantageous state-corresponding effect executing means is the same as in the special state when the effect is executed by the first pattern. Alternatively, as a similar effect, an effect corresponding to the change of the variable device to the first state (for example, the HIT display 006IW110 shown in FIG. 9-58 (D)) can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used. It may be configured to perform step 006IWS9810). According to such a configuration, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it can be easily pretended to be in a special state.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to means 5, a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A variable device that can be changed to (for example, a closed state) (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) and a specific effect that encourages the entry of the game medium into the variable device (for example, FIGS. 9-57 (B), (C). 006IW106) is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 006IWS9712), and the specific effect executing means executes the effect according to the second pattern. In this case, the specific effect can be executed, and the specific effect is not executed when the effect is executed according to the first pattern (for example, in the modification 6, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 006IWS9711, the special figure is as it is. It may be configured to end the hit waiting process). According to such a configuration, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it can be easily pretended to be in a special state.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to means 6, advantageous state control that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a predetermined area (for example, a passing gate 006IW041). Means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that shifts to the process of step 006IWS2502 or later when step 006IWS2501 is Y) and a promotion effect that promotes the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, FIG. 9-57). The promotion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 006IWS9716) capable of executing the gate passage promotion display 006IW107 shown in (C) is provided, and the promotion effect execution means is produced by the second pattern. The promotion effect can be executed when it is executed, and the promotion effect is not executed when the effect is executed according to the first pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 006IWS9715 and S9716). It may be configured as shown in (C) and FIG. 9-58 (C). According to such a configuration, in the special state, the game entertainment can be improved when the game value is given by the special state.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to means 6, advantageous state control that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a predetermined area (for example, a passage gate 006IW041). Means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that shifts to the process of step 006IWS2502 or later when step 006IWS2501 is Y) and a promotion effect that promotes the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, FIG. 9-57). The promotion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 006IWS9716) capable of executing the gate passage promotion display 006IW107 shown in (C) is provided, and the promotion effect execution means is produced by the second pattern. The promotion effect can be executed when it is executed, and the promotion effect is executed in a mode limited to the case where the effect is executed according to the first pattern (for example, in the modification 4, the effect control CPU 120 has steps 006IWS9715 to S9716A is executed. See FIGS. 9-57 (C) and 9-68 (C)). According to such a configuration, in the special state, the game entertainment can be improved when the game value is given by the special state.

(Means 9) In any of the means 1 to the means 8, a specific state (for example, a low probability / high base state (first KT state)) that is different from the special state and is more advantageous to the player than the non-special state. )) Is provided with controllable specific state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 006IWS2216 to S2218), and the specific state control means is provided for a predetermined period (for example, after the special state is completed). When it is possible to control a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 006IWS67A to S72A and S67B to S72B) over a period until the variation display is completed 100 times) and is controlled to a special state. After displaying a predetermined display (for example, 100 count display 006IW102 shown in FIG. 9-56 (A)) in a predetermined mode indicating a predetermined period in advance, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed to a special mode. (For example, an effect of superimposing the standby display 006IW103 on the count display 006IW102 shown in FIG. 9-56 (B)) can be executed (for example, steps 006IWS9825, S9833 in the effect control microcomputer 100). It may be configured to include a part). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest in advance that the special state is controlled to a specific state for a predetermined period after the end of the special state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means 10) In the means 9, when the special state is terminated, the return effect of changing the display mode of the predetermined display from the special mode to the predetermined mode (for example, the waiting display 006IW103 shown in FIG. 9-56 (D) is deleted. It may be configured to include a return effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 006IWS967) capable of executing the effect of making the count display 006IW102 visible again 100 times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the special state is controlled to a specific state for a predetermined period after the end of the special state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the board surface structure of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 006IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in a feature part 006IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasis effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect pattern determination table in a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect pattern determination table in a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the one-announcement effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of one announcement production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the suggestion effect at the time of an over prize, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the suggestion effect of a prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the suggestion effect at the time of an over prize, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the suggestion effect of a prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode in the 2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the big hit middle production by the 2nd pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the big hit middle production by the 1st pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution timing of the production in the big hit middle production by the 2nd pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process during a big hit in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect pattern determination table in a big hit in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process during a big hit in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect pattern determination table during a big hit in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process during a big hit in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect pattern determination table during a big hit in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect pattern determination table during a big hit in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the big hit middle effect by the 1st pattern in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure in the modification 6.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a right-handed operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to nails. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time) is in progress, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting area and an operating area.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state, is satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to transmit the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to determine one of them. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, the variation display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a drive of a movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature unit 006IW)
Next, the feature unit 006IW will be described. First, the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 006IW will be described. FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 006IW. FIG. 9-1 shows the board configuration of the right region of the gaming region of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the feature unit 006IW, the board surface configuration of the left region of the gaming region of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the configuration shown in FIG.

In the feature unit 006IW, when the player performs a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right area of the game area, the game ball that has entered the right area is released from the opening 006IW200 provided in the right area. Enter the common route 006IW201. If a game ball enters the common path 006IW201 while the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state during the big hit game state, the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening). To do. The game ball that has won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by the first count switch 23.

When the jackpot game is not in progress or the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed, the game ball that does not win the special variable winning ball device 7 is left on the bottom member above the special variable winning ball device 7. It is guided from one side to the right and falls in the common path 006IW201 from the right end of the special variable winning ball device 7. The game ball falling in the common path 006IW201 passes through the passage gate 006IW041 provided in the common path 006IW201. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 006IW041 is detected by the gate switch 006IW021.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, the passage gate 006IW041 may be provided not in the common path 006IW201 but above the opening 006IW200, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a distribution member 006IW204 is provided below the passage gate 006IW041. The distribution member 006IW204 is configured to distribute the game ball to the left and right by a physical action due to its own weight when the game ball falls, and the game ball falling in the common path 006IW201 is distributed at a rate of 1/4. It is distributed to the left first route 006IW202 and distributed to the right second route 006IW203 at a ratio of 3/4.

In this example, the case where the distribution member 006IW204 is configured to distribute the game balls by a physical action is shown, but it is also possible to configure the distribution member 006IW204 to electrically distribute the game balls by using a solenoid or a drive motor. Good.

Further, instead of providing the distribution member 006IW204, for example, the game balls are distributed to the first path 006IW202 and the second path 006IW203 at a ratio of 1: 3 by the arrangement of the nails provided in the common path 006IW201. It may be configured.

The game ball distributed to the first path 006IW202 is guided from right to left in the first path 006IW202, and wins a prize ball device 006IW6B having a second starting winning opening provided at the left end of the first path 006IW202. It is possible. The game ball that has won a prize in the winning ball device 006IW6B (second starting winning opening) is detected by the second starting opening switch 006IW22B.

The game ball distributed to the second path 006IW203 once falls in the second path 006IW203, and is further guided in the second path 006IW203 from right to left. As shown in FIG. 9-1, a variable winning ball device 006IW6C having a first starting winning opening is provided on the right side of the second path 006IW203. In this example, the variable winning ball device 006IW6C is frequently controlled to the open state in the high base state, and the game ball is set to the second path 006IW203 when the variable winning ball device 006IW6C is controlled to the open state. When the player enters, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening). The game ball that has won a prize in the variable winning ball device 006IW6C is detected by the first start port switch 006IW22C.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the left side of the second path 006IW203. The game ball that did not win the variable winning ball device 006IW6C because the variable winning ball device 006IW6C is controlled to be closed is guided from right to left on the bottom member above the variable winning ball device 006IW6C, and is specially variable. It is guided to the winning ball device 17. In this case, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening). The game ball that has won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 is detected by the second count switch 24.

The game ball that has not won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 falls from the left end portion of the second path 006IW203 and is discharged from the out port.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 006IW6C are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. ing. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 006IW6C are provided with the regulation piece, so that the ball flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured not to have such a regulation piece.

Further, in the feature unit 006IW, when a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) and is detected by the first count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) and is detected by the second count switch 24, 10 prize balls are paid out. In addition, a game ball wins a prize in the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), the winning ball device 006IW6B (second starting winning opening), and the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening), and the first starting When detected by the mouth switch 22A, the second start port switch 006IW22B, and the first start port switch 006IW22C, one prize ball is paid out. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 10 and is detected by the detection switch, three prize balls are paid out.

Next, the gaming state in the feature unit 006IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 006IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 006IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In this example, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left area of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the game ball mainly wins the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, when controlled to the KT state, the player performs a right-handed operation. In this example, the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state) is controlled to a high base state, and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled to a low base state. As described above, in this example, the game ball is allocated to the first path 006IW202 at a rate of 1/4, and the game ball is allocated to the second path 006IW203 at a rate of 3/4, but the first KT state. In the case of, since it is controlled to the high base state, the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening) is frequently opened, and the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening) is opened. Easy to win. Therefore, in the first KT state, the rate at which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is high. Further, in the first KT state, the game ball guided to the second path 006IW203 frequently wins the variable winning ball device 006IW6C, so that even if a small hit occurs in the KT state, the special variable on the downstream side There are very few cases where a game ball wins a prize in the winning ball device 17 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations).

Further, in the second KT state, since the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening) is not opened frequently because it is controlled to the low base state, the winning ball device 006IW6B (second) The frequency of winning the starting prize opening) is higher. Therefore, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, in the second KT state, the game ball guided to the second path 006IW203 hardly wins the variable winning ball device 006IW6C, so that it is directly guided to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side and a small hit occurs. If this is the case, the game ball is likely to win the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side.

In this example, the rate at which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is high in the first KT state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed in the second KT state. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, it may be configured so that the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed even in the first KT state, and the configuration shown by the feature unit 006IW is applied.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 9-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 006IW. In this feature unit 006IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 006IW021 and a start port switch (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 006IW22B, and first start port switch 006IW22C). , The detection signal from the count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this feature unit 006IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 006IW081 for an ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 006IW6C). It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-3 and 9-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-3 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-4 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "198/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "248/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "1438/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. It has become. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "1938/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

Further, in this example, for example, when compared in the case of the set value "3", the jackpot probability is 218/65536 in the non-probability state (low probability state), which is about 1/300, whereas the probability change state. In the (high probability state), the jackpot probability is 1638/65536, which is about 1/40, and the jackpot probability is higher in the probabilistic state (high probability state) than in the non-probability state (low probability state).

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). Regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state), it may not be determined as a small hit when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B), the number of judgment values for each set value is matched by making the probability of loss different between the set values "1" to "6". It is configured as follows.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a low probability.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "198/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "248/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "1438/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. It has become. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "1938/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "32768/65536" (that is, 1/2) regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 9). As shown in -3 and FIG. 9-4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and (B) and 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-5 (A) and 9-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "16R probability variation jackpot A" and "16R probability variation jackpot B" based on the random number for hit type determination. , "6R probability variation jackpot A", "6R probability variation jackpot B", "6R normal jackpot", "4R probability variation jackpot", or "4R probability variation jackpot", is a table referenced to determine.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in this feature unit 006IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", 25% probability of "16R probability variation jackpot A", 5% probability of "6R probability variation jackpot A", 35% probability of "6R probability variation jackpot B", 35% probability of determination It is decided as "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "16R probability variation jackpot B" with a 55% probability, "4R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, and "4R normal jackpot" with a 35% probability.

The "16R probability variation jackpot A" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability / low base state (second KT state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "16R probability variation jackpot B" is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, a high probability / low base state (second KT state) or a high probability / high base state (first KT state). ) Is a big hit.

The "6R probability variation jackpot A" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability / low base state (second KT state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot B" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability / high base state (first KT state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability / high base state (first KT state) after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of four rounds and shifts to a high probability / high base state (first KT state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of four rounds and shifts to a low probability / high base state (first KT state) after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In this feature unit 006IW, when controlled to the jackpot game state, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of games in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until the ball wins, and up to 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. However, in the big hit game based on "16R probability change big hit A" and "16R probability change big hit B", in the 16th round, the opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 3 seconds, and the opening of 3 seconds is executed three times.

In this example, "16R probability variation jackpot A" and "16R probability variation jackpot" are also collectively referred to as "16R probability variation jackpot", and "6R probability variation jackpot A" and "6R probability variation jackpot B" are comprehensively 6R. It is also called "probability change jackpot".

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. Control to execute the variable display is performed. In this example, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating that the state is in the high base state is set, and if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high base flag is set. (If it is in a high base state), it is decided to hit a normal symbol with a high probability of 99/100, and the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening) is controlled to be in the open state with high frequency. In addition, if the high base flag is not set (in the low base state), it is decided to hit the normal symbol with a low probability of 1/100, and the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning opening). Decreases the probability that will be open.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is the same regardless of whether or not it is in a high base state, and if it is in a high base state, the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning prize). The opening time of the mouth) may be long, and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 006IW6C (first starting winning mouth) may be shortened if the base is low.

(Variation pattern table)
9-6 to 9-8 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature unit 006IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

In this example, since there is no case of a small hit when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (see FIG. 9-3), the first variation patterns # 04 and # 08 are not provided. May be.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 2 minutes.

In this feature unit 006IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 006IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In this feature unit 006IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 006IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 2 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 4R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-7 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 4R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 9-7 (Fig. 9-7). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be one. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined to be 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 4R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 9-7 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 006IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. A second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 006IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 006IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 006IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot B or the 4R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is ended. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-8 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if the second and subsequent fluctuation displays are executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot B or the 4R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, FIG. 9-8 (Fig. 9-8) The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations shown in H) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-8 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 9-9 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-8 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-9, in this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

Note that FIG. 9-9 shows, as an example, a variation pattern table in which the small hit variation of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, but FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is highly probable in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Direction control command)
9-10 and 9-11 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot A. Is. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot B (display result 3 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot B designation command)). Is. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot A. Is. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation jackpot B. Is. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (4R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 4R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (4R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 4R normal jackpot. .. The command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 9 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 006IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the display result designation command, but the 16R probability variation jackpot A / 16R probability variation jackpot B / 6R probability variation jackpot A / 6R probability variation jackpot B / 6R normal jackpot / 4R probability variation jackpot / 4R normal. The variation pattern command may be determined corresponding to each of the big hit / small hit / loss, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command, but this feature unit 006IW Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 006IW041.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-10 and 9-11, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-10 and 9-11 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 006IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 006IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the first random number buffer area of (step 006IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 006IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 006IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 006IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 006IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 006IWS67A without performing the processing after step 006IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 006IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 006IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 006IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 006IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 006IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 006IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 006IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 006IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot B, or 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 006IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored. (Step 006IWS63A), the process proceeds to step 006IWS67A.

If the big hit is not made in step 006IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 006IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 006IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 006IWS65A). Step 006IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS67A.

However, in this example, since the small hit probability is set to 0% when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (see FIG. 9-3), the small hit in the process of step 006IWS64A. There is no case to decide. In addition, not limited to the processing mode shown in this example, the processing itself of steps 006IWS64A to S66A may be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 006IWS67A), and if it is "0", step 006IWS73A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 006IWS68A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 006IWS69A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 006IWS73A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 006IWS70A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 006IWS71A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 006IWS72A). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS73A.

In this feature unit 006IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 4R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / 1st KT state) and 100 times of variation display is executed. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 100th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 006IWS69A and S69B, and the high base flag is set in steps 006IWS70A and S70B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 006IWS71A and S71B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation shortening common to the first KT state. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 006IWS72A or the process of step 006IWS72B described later, the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When the final fluctuation of (in this example, the 100th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 100th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 006IWS73A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006IWS73A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 006IWS73A is confirmed.

In step 006IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 006IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (Fig. 9-6). -See FIG. 9-8), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 006IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 006IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 006IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-6 is used (step 006IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 006IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 006IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 006IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 006IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 006IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 9 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 006IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 006IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 006IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS1123A). Step 006IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 006IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 006IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 006IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 006IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process ends as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 006IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 006IWS63A. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 006IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 006IWS1126A), either 16R probability variation jackpot or 6R probability variation jackpot. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 006IWS1127A, N in step 006IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first compulsory symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 006IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 006IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 006IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 006IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 006IWS1120A, the processing of steps 006IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer of step 006IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 006IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 006IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 006IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 006IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS2013A).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 006IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 006IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 006IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 006IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 006IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 006IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 006IW041, so right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 006IW041. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 006IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 006IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 006IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 006IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2027A.

However, in this example, since the small hit probability is set to 0% when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (see FIG. 9-3), Y is displayed in the process of step 006IWS2020A. There is no case to judge. In addition, not limited to the processing mode shown in this example, the processing itself of steps 006IWS2020A to S2026A may be omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 006IWS2027A).

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 006IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 006IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second hold storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step 006IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 006IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 006IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 006IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 006IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 006IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 006IWS67B without performing the processing after step 006IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 006IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 006IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 006IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 006IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 006IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 006IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 006IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 006IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot B, 4R probability variation jackpot, or 4R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 006IWS62B), the jackpot type is stored (step 006IWS63B), and the step Move to 006IWS67B.

If the big hit is not made in step 006IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 006IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 006IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 006IWS65B). Step 006IWS66B). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS67B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 006IWS67B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 006IWS73B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 006IWS68B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 006IWS69B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 006IWS73B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 006IWS70B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 006IWS71B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 006IWS72B). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS73B.

Then, in step 006IWS73B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006IWS73B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 006IWS73B is confirmed.

In step 006IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-13. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-13, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 006IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-7 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 9-7 (D) to 9-8 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (D). Is selected, and if the variation is 2 to 99, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (E) is selected, and if the variation is 100, the second variation shown in FIG. 9-7 (F) is selected. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-8 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-8 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-8 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 006IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 7 designation command, display result 8 designation command, display result 9 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 006IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 006IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 006IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS1123B). Step 006IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 006IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 006IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 006IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 006IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process ends as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot (step 006IWS1128B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 006IWS63B. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 006IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 006IWS1126B), either 16R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed (Y in step 006IWS1127B, N in step 006IWS1128B), the CPU 103 sends the second compulsory symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 006IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 006IWS1130B).

However, in this example, since the small hit probability is set to 0% when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (see FIG. 9-3), Y is displayed in the process of step 006IWS1126B. There is no case to judge. Not limited to the processing mode shown in this example, the processing itself in steps 006IWS1126B to S1128B may be omitted.

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (4R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 006IWS1129B. It is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol as a display result.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 006IWS1128B), but in this case, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 006IWS1120B, the processing of steps 006IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 006IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 006IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 006IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 006IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 006IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 006IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 006IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 006IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 006IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 006IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 006IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 006IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 006IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 006IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 006IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 006IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 006IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 006IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 006IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 006IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. Or the process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 006IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 006IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 006IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 006IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 006IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 006IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 006IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 006IW021 has been input (step 006IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 006IW021 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 006IW021 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state (high probability state) is set (step 006IWS2502). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set (step 006IWS2503). If the high base flag was not set (that is, if the high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the CPU 103 had the game state before the start of the big hit game was the second KT state (small hit RUSH). A small hit RUSH storage flag indicating that is set (step 006IWS2504).

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time reduction flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 006IWS2505). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 006IWS2506), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 006IWS2507).

In this feature unit 006IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 006IW041 is played. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 006IW021.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 006IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 006IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 006IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 006IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 006IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is 16R probability variation jackpot A or 6R probability variation jackpot A (step 006IWS2204). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot A or the 6R probability variation jackpot A is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 006IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is the 16R probability variation jackpot A or the 6R probability variation jackpot A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 006IWS2205). Further, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 006IWS2206). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2219. If the 16R probability variation jackpot A or the 6R probability variation jackpot A is used, the high base flag is not set, so that the control is performed in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). ..

If it is neither 16R probability variation jackpot A nor 6R probability variation jackpot A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is 16R probability variation jackpot B (step 006IWS2207). Whether or not it is the 16R probability variation jackpot B can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 006IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 006IWS2208). Further, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 006IWS2209). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit RUSH storage flag is set (step 006IWS2210). If the small hit RUSH storage flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 006IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2219.

By executing the processes of steps 006IW2207 to S2211, in this example, when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is obtained (when the variation display of the second special symbol results in a 16R probability variation jackpot), the game state before the start of the jackpot game. Is the second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high base flag is not set, so that the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled. On the other hand, if the game state before the start of the big hit game is not the second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high base flag is set and the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). become.

If it is not the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is the 6R probability variation jackpot B or the 4R probability variation jackpot (step 006IWS2212). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot B or a 4R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 006IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 006IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. .. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot B or a 4R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 006IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 006IWS2214), and further sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 006IWS2215). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2219. Therefore, when it is a 6R probability variation jackpot B or a 4R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of 6R probability variation jackpot B or 4R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 006IWS2505 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot B or the 4R probability variation jackpot, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Therefore, it is determined as Y in step 006IWS67A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 006IWS67B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 006IWS68A and step 006IWS68B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is neither 6R probability variation jackpot B nor 4R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is 6R normal jackpot or 4R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 006IWS2216). The special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 006IWS2217). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 006IWS2218). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2219. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 006IWS2219). If the small hit RUSH storage flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set small hit RUSH storage flag.

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 006IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 006IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 006IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 006IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 006IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 006IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 006IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 006IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the right-handed display 26 (step 006IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 006IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 006IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 006IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 006IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 006IW will be described. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 006IW. First, in this feature unit 006IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A), and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the 16R probability variable jackpot A, the 6R probability variable jackpot A, the 6R probability variable jackpot B, or the 6R A big hit usually occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, when 16R probability variation jackpot A or 6R probability variation jackpot A occurs in the low probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT) after the end of the jackpot game. State), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 006IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot B occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained until (see steps 006IWS2212 to S2215). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed (see steps 006IWS2216 to S2218).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature unit 006IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Among them, in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the winning rate to the first starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 006IW6C) is high, and the rate of executing the variable display of the first special symbol is high. .. In addition, since the rate at which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed is high, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), 16R probability variation jackpot A and 6R probability variation jackpot A and 6R probability variation jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot B, or 6R normal jackpot is likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, when 16R probability variation jackpot A or 6R probability variation jackpot A occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), high probability / low after the end of the jackpot game. The base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 006IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot B occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. Then, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 006IWS2212 to S2215). In this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot B is 35% in total (see FIG. 9-5), so that the probability is once high / In the high base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 100 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 006IWS2216 to S2218).

Further, in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the winning rate to the first starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 006IW6C) is high, and the rate at which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is high. high. In addition, since the rate at which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed is high, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the 16R probability variation jackpot A and the 6R probability variation jackpot A and 6R probability variation jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot B, or 6R normal jackpot is likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, when 16R probability variation jackpot A or 6R probability variation jackpot A occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), high probability / low after the end of the jackpot game. The base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 006IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot B occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. Then, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 006IWS2212 to S2215). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 100 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 006IWS2216 to S2218). In this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIG. 9-5), so that the probability is once low / high base state. In that case, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 9-23 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 006IWS67A to S71A, S67B to S71B).

Further, in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the start prize is mainly generated in the second start winning opening (winning ball device 006IW6B), and the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. .. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), 16R probability variation jackpot B, 4R probability variation jackpot, or 4R Usually a big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, when a 16R probability variation jackpot B occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a high probability / low base state (high probability) occurs after the jackpot game ends. / Second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 006IWS2207 to S2211). In this feature unit 006IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 16R probability variation jackpot B is 55% when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore (see FIG. 9-5), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 55%. In addition, when a 4R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 006IWS2212-S2215). In addition, when a 4R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 100 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 006IWS2216 to S2218).

In addition, in FIG. 9-23, the case where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot B occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (see steps 006IWS2210 and S2211). Further, when a 4R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 4R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-23, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot B occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (see steps 006IWS2210 and S2211). Further, when a 4R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 4R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-23, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot B occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (see steps 006IWS2210 and S2211). Further, when a 4R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 4R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-23, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot A or the 6R probability variation jackpot A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R probability variation jackpot B occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-24 to 9-27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 006IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 006IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 006IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 006IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 006IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 006IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 006IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 006IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 006IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 006IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 006IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 006IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 006IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 006IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 006IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 006IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 006IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 006IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 006IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 006IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command in which the large winning opening is open (step 006IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is the number of winnings for counting the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 006IWS634). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag for opening the big winning opening, which specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (it is a round period during the big hit game) (step 006IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 006IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 006IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 006IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 006IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 006IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 006IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 006IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 006IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). Control to display in the blue background image) (step 006IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 006IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 006IWS645).

In this example, the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game (except during the big hit game based on the 4R probability variation big hit and the 4R normal big hit), or the game is played in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. The value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated when a ball wins a prize (see steps 006IWS660 and S667), but the game state is low probability / due to the processing of step 006IWS645 being executed. The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) is reached and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 006IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display the image (green background image) (step 006IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 006IWS648), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating that it is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that it is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 006IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 006IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). Control to display with the green background image) (step 006IWS651). In this example, the same background image is displayed in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, and at first glance, it is controlled to the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state. It is configured so that it cannot be recognized whether it is done. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 006IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 006IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 006IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Control is performed to display as a red background image or a background image including a character image (step 006IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 006IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 006IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step 006IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot-based jackpot game is in progress. (Step 006IWS659). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is during the jackpot effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). ), And also check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 specified command to the display result 6 specified command. It can be judged by.

During a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 006IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 006IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 006IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is based on the fact that a prize is generated in the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the number of prize balls display are updated. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is made to the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 4R probability variation big hit or the 4R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 006IWS662). It should be noted that the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 006IWS663). In addition, in the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. This is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 006IWS664). In the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, 5000 pieces) is highlighted.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 006IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 006IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 006IWS668).

By executing the process of steps 006IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball are based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special prize opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 006IWS669). In addition, the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 006IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 006IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process (step 006IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 006IWS670). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing (step 006IWS662) at the time of over winning. In the over-winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 006IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 006IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, and the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined (step 006IWS303).

FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning. As shown in FIGS. 9-29, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIGS. 9-29, in this example, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the image display device 5 displays the winning in the normal display color (white in this example) (in this example, “+15”. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-29, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound B different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound C different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound D different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound E different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 9-29, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. In step 006IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of over winning are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-29, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-29, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value. When it is "4", it is 55%, when it is the set value "5", it is 60%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 65%. As described above, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 006IWS303 (step 006IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 006IWS305). .. For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over-winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 006IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 006IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 006IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. In the normal display color (white in this example), the winning display is controlled to be displayed (step 006IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 006IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing (step 006IWS669) at the time of winning a small hit. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect. This is performed, and the presence / absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined (step 006IWS321).

FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of winning a small hit. As shown in FIG. 9-31, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. Judgment values are assigned to C, the small hit winning suggestion effect D, the small hit winning suggestion effect E, and the small hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-31, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 9-31, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. .. In step 006IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-31, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A to F, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and the set value "4". When it is, it is 8%, when it is the set value "5", it is 9%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 10%. As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 006IWS321 (step 006IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step). 006IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 006IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of a small hit winning (N in step 006IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Step 006IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 006IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed by any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas the small hit If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is executed by the aspect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by setting only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound to be different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over winning or a small hit winning It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 006IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 006IWS341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 006IWS341, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 006IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws lots based on random numbers. The process is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 006IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS359.

FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 006IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N). Step 006IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 006IWS344, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 006IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. Is determined (step 006IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 006IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N). Step 006IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 006IWS347, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 006IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 006IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 006IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N). Step 006IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 006IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 006IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. Is determined (step 006IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 006IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N). Step 006IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 006IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value “5” or more (step 006IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. Is determined (step 006IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 006IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (N). Step 006IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 006IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 006IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 006IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined in step 006IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 006IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 006IWS360). For example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set value is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is in progress. As the period of prize balls increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value. The accuracy of confirming "5" or more, confirming the set value "6", and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Although the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different between the effects D to F, it is configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect with the same execution probability regardless of such a mode. You may.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 006IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 in this example). (Step 006IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 006IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and is a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the prize ball number emphasizing effect is present (step 006IWS372).

FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-35, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined in step 006IWS372 (step 006IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 006IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "1000 OVER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. Not limited to the mode. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed in all of these cases, but also when the prize ball number reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000, the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed. It may be configured. Further, for example, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, and various aspects can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, the current set value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the usual one.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-36 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step 006IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 006IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS812). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the normal state or the first KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol (if it is in the normal state or the first KT state). Step 006IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 006IWS815).

If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol (step 006IWS814). .. Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 006IWS815).

By executing the process of steps 006IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 006IW, in the normal state or the first KT state, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When the variation display is executed and the state is in the second KT state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the second KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the normal state or the first KT state. In some cases, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

If the variation pattern command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation of the operation means such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been detected (step 0906IWS816). If the operation of the operation means is detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the selection operation of the one-shot notification high-frequency mode, which has a high execution frequency of the one-shot notification effect, has been performed (step 006IWS817). If the selection operation of the one-shot notification high-frequency mode is performed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the one-shot notification high-frequency flag indicating that the mode is one-shot notification high-frequency mode (step 006IWS818). On the other hand, if the selection operation of the one-shot notification high-frequency mode is not performed (that is, if the selection operation of the one-shot notification low-frequency mode with a low execution frequency of the one-shot notification effect is performed), the effect control CPU 120 Resets the one-shot notification high frequency flag (step 006IWS819).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 006IWS616 to S619, the one-shot notification high-frequency mode or the one-shot notification low-frequency mode is selected while the variation display is not executed (for example, the customer waiting demonstration state). Is possible.

In this example, a case is shown in which the one-shot notification high-frequency mode or the one-shot notification low-frequency mode can be selected while the variable display is not executed (for example, the customer waiting demonstration state). However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured so that the one-shot notification high-frequency mode or the one-shot notification low-frequency mode can be selected during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and various modes can be considered.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result (step 006IWS921). In step 006IWS921, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols do not completely match are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. In addition, when the display result 2 designation command to the display result 5 designation command or the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined that one of the probabilistic jackpots is determined), the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is an odd symbol. Determine the combination of the aligned symbols. In addition, when the display result 6 designation command or the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpots), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers is determined. To do. In addition, when the display result 9 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is a special symbol (for example, a star symbol)). (Combination of symbols aligned with) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a jackpot medium effect pattern setting process for setting an effect pattern during the jackpot game (step 006IWS922). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a one-shot notification effect setting process for setting the one-shot notification effect (step 006IWS923).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the high base number counter for counting the remaining number of times in the high base state is 0 on the effect control means side (step 006IWS924). If the value of the high base number counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the waiting flag indicating that the count of the remaining number of times in the high base state is waiting is set (step 006IWS925). ). If the standby flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the high base count counter value (step 006IWS926), and confirms whether or not the subtracted high base count counter value is 0. (Step 006IWS927). If the value of the high base count counter after subtraction is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a count display indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state displayed on the image display device 5 of the high base count counter after subtraction. Update according to the value (step 006IWS928). On the other hand, if the value of the high base number counter after subtraction is 0, the effect control CPU 120 erases the count display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 006IWS929).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 006IWS930). To check whether the variable display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 006IWS934 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 006IWS930), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 006IWS931).

In step 006IWS931, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 006IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 9-38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-38, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “2”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value "4". The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS932). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 006IWS934 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 006IWS932), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 006IWS933).

FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not determined, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". However, when the second KT state is in the state, the jackpot occurs. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be extended without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Selects the process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 006IWS934).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 006IWS934 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 006IWS935). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 006IWS936). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 006IWS936 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 006IWS934. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 006IWS936 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 006IWS934. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 006IWS937). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 006IWS938).

(Production pattern setting process during big hit)
FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect pattern setting process (step 006IWS922) in the variable display start setting process. In the big hit middle effect pattern setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS501). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the second KT state to 1. Add (step 006IWS502).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a big hit (step 006IWS503). Whether or not it is a jackpot fluctuation can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If there is a big hit fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 selects a big hit medium effect pattern determination table according to the value of the fluctuation number counter as a table for determining the effect pattern (big hit medium effect pattern) during the big hit game ( Step 006IWS504). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected jackpot effect pattern determination table, and determines the jackpot effect pattern (step 006IWS505).

9-41 and 9-42 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the big hit medium effect pattern determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-41 and 9-42, in the jackpot effect pattern determination table, determination values are assigned to the first pattern and the second pattern as the jackpot effect pattern, respectively. The "first pattern" is an effect pattern that executes the same effect as in the second KT state (variation display in the second KT state or in the customer waiting state) in the jackpot game generated in the second KT state. Therefore, in this example, when the "first pattern" is selected as the jackpot effect pattern, the same effect is executed from the second KT state to the jackpot game, so that the player is in the jackpot game. It's hard to recognize that. Further, the "second pattern" is an effect pattern for executing a normal big hit medium effect.

FIG. 9-41 (1) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table A selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is less than 20. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is less than 20 times, the first pattern is determined with a probability of 90% as the big hit medium effect pattern. The second pattern is determined with a probability of 10%.

FIG. 9-41 (2) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table B selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 20 or more and less than 40. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 20 times or more and less than 40 times, there is an 80% probability that the first jackpot production pattern will occur. The pattern is determined and there is a 20% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-41 (3) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table C selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 40 or more and less than 60. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (3), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 40 times or more and less than 60 times, the first jackpot production pattern has a 70% probability of being the first. The pattern is determined, and there is a 30% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-41 (4) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table D selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 60 or more and less than 80. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (4), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 60 times or more and less than 80 times, there is a 60% probability that the first jackpot production pattern will occur. The pattern is determined and there is a 40% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-41 (5) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table E selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 80 or more and less than 120. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (5), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 80 times or more and less than 120 times, there is a 50% probability that the first jackpot production pattern will occur. The pattern is determined and there is a 50% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-41 (6) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table F selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 120 or more and less than 140. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (6), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 120 times or more and less than 140 times, there is a 40% probability that the first jackpot production pattern will occur. The pattern is determined and there is a 60% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-42 (7) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table G selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 140 or more and less than 160. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (7), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 140 times or more and less than 160 times, there is a 30% probability that the first jackpot production pattern will occur. The pattern is determined, and there is a 70% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-42 (8) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table H selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 160 or more and less than 180. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (8), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 160 times or more and less than 180 times, there is a 20% probability that the first jackpot production pattern will occur. The pattern is determined, and there is an 80% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-42 (9) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table I selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 180 or more and less than 200. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (9), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 180 times or more and less than 200 times, the first jackpot production pattern has a probability of 10%. The pattern is determined and there is a 90% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-42 (10) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table J selected when the value of the fluctuation number counter is 200 or more. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (10), when the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the second KT state is 200 times or more, the second pattern is determined with a 100% probability as the big hit medium effect pattern. To.

In this example, when the big hit middle effect pattern determination table J is selected, the second pattern is decided with a 100% probability, but it is not limited to such a mode, and any big hit. Even if the middle effect pattern determination table is selected, there may be a case where the first pattern is always determined and a case where the second pattern is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 9-41 and 9-42, in this example, the smaller the number of fluctuations from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot gaming state (the jackpot after the transition to the second KT state). The shorter the period until the game is controlled), the higher the rate of determining the first pattern, and the greater the number of fluctuations from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot game state (the second KT state). The longer the period from the transition to the jackpot game state to the control of the jackpot game state), the higher the rate of determining the second pattern. With such a configuration, in this example, if a big hit occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state, it is difficult to recognize that it is a big hit, and in the second KT state (small hit RUSH). It makes it possible to reduce the disappointment of not being able to obtain the profit that was supposed to be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-41 and 9-42, in this example, as a general rule, the selection ratio of the big hit middle effect pattern is changed every time the number of fluctuations after the transition to the second KT state becomes 20 times. However, it is configured so that the selection ratio does not change over 40 times only during the period when the number of partial fluctuations is 80 times or more and less than 120 times. By configuring in this way, in this example, the method of changing the selection ratio of the big hit medium effect pattern is configured to have diversity.

When the first pattern is determined as the big hit medium effect pattern (Y in step 006IWS506). The effect control CPU 120 sets a first pattern flag indicating that the first pattern has been determined as the effect pattern during the jackpot (step 006IWS507). On the other hand, when the second pattern is determined as the effect pattern during the big hit (N in step 006IWS506). The production pattern setting process during the big hit ends as it is.

In this example, if a big hit occurs during a game state other than the second KT state, it is determined as N in step 006IWS501, and the big hit middle effect pattern setting process is terminated as it is, so that the big hit by the second pattern is in progress. The production (normal big hit production) will be executed.

Not limited to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, in step 006IWS503, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot among the jackpots, and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained. In this case, the process may be shifted to the process of step 006IWS504 or later, and the first pattern may be determined as the big hit medium effect pattern.

(One-shot notification production setting process)
FIG. 9-43 is a flowchart showing a one-shot notification effect setting process (step 006IWS923) in the variable display start setting process. In the one-shot notification effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step 006IWS521). It should be noted that whether or not the display is a variable display that is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. If it is not a variable display that is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the one-shot notification effect setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a variation display that is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS522). If the first pattern flag is set, the one-shot notification effect setting process is terminated as it is.

If the first pattern flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the one-shot notification high frequency flag is set (step 006IWS523). If the one-shot notification high-frequency flag is not set (that is, in the one-shot notification low-frequency mode), the effect control CPU is used as a table for determining the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect for low-frequency setting. Select the one-shot notification effect determination table (step 006IWS524). On the other hand, if the one-shot notification high-frequency flag is set (that is, in the one-shot notification high-frequency mode), the effect control CPU has a high frequency as a table for determining the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect. Select the one-shot notification effect determination table for setting (step 006IWS525). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected one-shot notification effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect (step 006IWS526).

FIG. 9-44 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the one-shot notification effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-44 (A) shows a specific example of the one-shot notification effect determination table for low frequency setting selected in step 006IWS524. Further, FIG. 9-44 (B) shows a specific example of the one-shot notification effect determination table for high frequency setting selected in step 006IWS525. As shown in FIGS. 9-44, in this example, in the one-shot notification low-frequency mode, the one-shot notification effect is executed only at a low rate of 10%, whereas in the one-shot notification high-frequency mode. In some cases, the one-shot notification effect is configured to be executed at a high rate of 50%.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 006IWS521, the one-shot notification effect may be executed only when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to recognize that if the one-shot notification effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is confirmed that the 16R probability variation jackpot will be obtained.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even if a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit is made, the one-shot notification effect can be determined, and if the one-shot notification effect is executed, the big hit may be obtained. It may be configured so that it can be recognized that it is confirmed.

Further, in this example, if the first pattern flag is set by executing the process of step 006IWS522 (that is, if the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed), one notification is made. Regardless of whether it is in the low-frequency mode or the high-frequency mode, it is restricted so that the one-shot notification effect is not uniformly executed. With such a configuration, by limiting the one-shot notification effect, when the big hit medium effect by the first pattern is subsequently executed, it is not controlled by the big hit game and is in the second KT state. It is easy to pretend.

When it is decided to execute the one-shot notification effect (Y in step 006IWS527), the effect control CPU 120 sets the one-shot notification effect execution flag indicating that the one-shot notification effect is to be executed (step 006IWS528). .. If it is decided not to execute the one-shot notification effect (N in step 006IWS527), the one-shot notification effect setting process is terminated as it is.

(Variable display production processing)
9-45 and 9-46 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 006IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 006IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 006IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 006IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 006IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the one-shot notification effect execution flag is set (step 006IWS8106). If the one-shot notification effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect (step 006IWS8107). It should be noted that whether or not it is the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (see step 006IWS937) set in the variable display start setting process. If it is the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set one-shot notification effect execution flag (step 006IWS8108) and outputs a predetermined one-shot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control is performed (step 006IWS8109).

In this example, a case where a one-shot notification sound is output as a one-shot notification effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a one-shot notification effect, an LED provided in the game frame is made to emit rainbow colors, a lamp or LED for one-shot notification is turned on, or a predetermined character image is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect to be performed may be executed, and any effect may be used as long as it is determined to be a 16R probability variation jackpot or various jackpots in some form.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the button effect is being executed (step 006IWS8110). Whether or not the button effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag when the process of steps 006IWS8111 to S8113 described later is executed and the button effect is started, and the flag is set in step 006IWS8110. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is present.

If the button effect is not being executed (N in step 006IWS8110), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS8111). If the first pattern flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect (step 006IWS8112). Whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (see step 006IWS937) set in the variable display start setting process. If it is the start timing of the button effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the operation promotion display prompting the operation of the push button 31B, and starts the button effect (step 006IWS8113). ).

If the button effect is being executed (Y in step 006IWS8110), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation from the push button 31B has been detected (step 006IWS8114). If the operation from the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a predetermined jackpot notification (for example, displaying characters such as "big hit") (step 006IWS8115). ..

In this example, when the jackpot effect according to the first pattern is executed, the one-shot notification effect is not executed as described above, but the button effect is produced by executing the process of steps 006IWS810-S8115. Is executed and is configured to be able to notify that it is a big hit.

In this example, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, the same effect as in the second KT state is executed, the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed as described later, and the big hit game is controlled. It is easy to pretend that it is in the second KT state, but it is a big hit, although it is inconspicuous compared to the derivation display of the big hit symbol by notifying by the button effect. Is made possible to notify.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, the button effect may not be executed so that the big hit game cannot be recognized at all.

Further, in this example, the case where the push button 31B is operated in the button effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the button effect, when the stick controller 31A is configured to be operated, or when the touch panel, the cross key, or the like is provided, the operation means such as the touch panel or the cross key is operated. It may be done, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS8116). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state or the first KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, receiving the first confirmation command). Whether or not the flag is set) is confirmed (step 006IWS8117). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006IWS8120).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 006IWS8118). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 006IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 006IWS8119). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006IWS8120).

If the second KT state flag is set in step 006IWS8116 (that is, if it is in the second KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, reception of the second confirmation command). Whether or not the flag is set) is confirmed (step 006IWS8121). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006IWS8124).

If the second symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 006IWS8122). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 006IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 006IWS8123). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006IWS8124).

If the first forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 006IWS8118, or if the second forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 006IWS8122, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 006IWS8125). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 006IWS8126). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 006IWS8127).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-47 and 9-48 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 006IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9708. In this feature unit 006IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 006IWS9706. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 006IWS9704 is performed. The process proceeds to step 006IWS9708 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 006IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9732. In the feature unit 006IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 006IWS9728. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 006IWS9704 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 006IWS9732 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9703). If the first pattern flag is not set (N in step 006IWS9703), the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. Control is performed to confirm the display of the symbol) (step 006IWS9704). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 006IWS8119 and S8123, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 006IWS9704. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the first pattern flag is set (Y in step 006IWS9703), the process proceeds to step 006IWS9705 without executing the process of step 006IWS9704. That is, in this example, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, it is controlled so that the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed at the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 006IWS9704 (Y in step 006IWS9705), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 006IWS9706). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer for measuring the period after the jackpot display for measuring the elapsed period after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (step 006IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 006IWS9708). If the jackpot start designation command has not been received (N in step 006IWS9708), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the gate passage promotion display for prompting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 006IW041 is being displayed (N). Step 006IWS9709). Whether or not the gate passage promotion display is being displayed is determined, for example, by setting a flag when the display of the gate passage promotion display is started in step 006IWS9716 described later, and in step 006IWS9709, the flag is set. You just have to check if it is set. If the gate passage promotion display is being displayed (Y in step 006IWS9709), the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

Unless the gate passage promotion display is being displayed (N in step 006IWS9709), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed notification prompting the right-handed operation is being displayed (step 006IWS9710). Whether or not the right-handed notification is being displayed is determined, for example, by setting a flag when the right-handed notification is started to be displayed in steps 006IWS9712 and S9713 described later, and in step 006IWS9710, the flag is set. You just have to check if it is set.

Unless the right-handed notification is being displayed (N in step 006IWS9710), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9711). If the first pattern flag is not set (that is, when the big hit middle effect by the second pattern is executed), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed notification in the normal mode on the image display device 5. Control to start (step 006IWS9712). If the first pattern flag is set (that is, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed notification in the reduced mode on the image display device 5. Control to start (step 006IWS9713).

If the right-handed notification is being displayed (Y in step 006IWS9710), the effect control CPU 120 has an elapsed period of 10 seconds after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed based on the value of the period measurement timer after the jackpot display. It is confirmed whether or not (step 006IWS9714). If the elapsed period from the derivation and display of the jackpot symbol is 10 seconds, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9715). If the first pattern flag is set, the special figure hit waiting process ends. If the first pattern flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the gate passage promotion display (step 006IWS9716).

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS9709 to S9716, in this example, the display of the right-handed notification is started immediately after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and then the display of the gate passage promotion display is started when 10 seconds have passed. .. However, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, only the right-handed notification of the reduced mode is displayed, and the gate passage promotion display is displayed even if 10 seconds have passed since the big hit symbol was derived and displayed. Not displayed (see Y in step 006IWS9715).

When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 006IWS9717).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 006IWS9718). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 006IWS9719). Whether or not the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether or not the received display result specification command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 6 designation command. It can be judged by checking. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 006IWS9720).

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS9718 to S9720, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, the display of the number of prize balls is not started when the big hit game based on the 4R probability variation big hit or the 4R normal big hit is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9721). If the first pattern flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the normal jackpot effect (step 006IWS9722). On the other hand, if the first pattern flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the pseudo first KT effect (step 006IWS9723).

In this example, when the big hit medium effect by the second pattern is executed, step 006IWS9725 and the big hit medium effect process (step S176) are executed according to the process table corresponding to the normal big hit medium effect selected in step 006IWS9722. By doing so, the normal jackpot production is executed during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot effect by the first pattern is executed, step 006IWS9725 and the jackpot effect process (step S176) are executed according to the process table for the pseudo second KT effect selected in step 006IWS9723. Even during the jackpot game, the same effect as during the second KT state is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 006IWS9724), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 006IWS9725).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 006IWS9726).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 006IWS9704 (N in step 006IWS9705), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 006IWS9704 (Y in step 006IWS9727), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 006IWS9728).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS9729). If the second KT state flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit count counter for counting the number of small hits generated in the second KT state (step 006IWS9730). Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the HIT display according to the value of the small hit count counter after the addition (step 006IWS9731). For example, if the value of the small hit count counter after addition is "8" (when the eighth small hit occurs in the second KT state), a character display such as "HIT08" is displayed as the HIT display. To do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 006IWS9732). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 006IWS9733).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 006IWS9734). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 006IWS9735), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 006IWS9736).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 006IWS9737).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 006IWS9704 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N of step 006IWS9705 and N of step 006IWS9727), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 006IWS9738).

(Production processing during big hit)
9-49 and 9-50 are flowcharts showing the big hit middle effect process (step S176) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the big hit end designation command is received (for example, whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag (see step 006IWS628) is set) ( Step 006IWS9801). If the jackpot end designation command has not been received (N in step 006IWS9801), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the display command after opening the jackpot (for example, the flag after opening the jackpot (see step 006IWS637)). (Whether or not is set) is confirmed (step 006IWS9802). If the display command after opening the large winning opening has not been received (N in step 006IWS9802), whether or not the CPU 120 for effect control has received the display command during opening of the large winning opening (for example, the flag opening the large winning opening (step). (See 006IWS635) is set or not) (step 006IWS9803).

If the display command during opening of the large winning opening is not received (N in step 006IWS9803), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 006IWS9804), and the effect device (image display) according to the contents of the process data n. The device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the game effect lamp 9, etc.) are controlled (step 006IWS9805).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006IWS9806), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 006IWS9807). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 006IWS9808).

If the large winning opening opening display command is received (Y in step 006IWS9803), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9809). If the first pattern flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the HIT display according to the number of rounds (step 006IWS9810). For example, when starting the first round of the jackpot game, a character display such as "HIT01" is displayed as the HIT display, and when starting the second round of the jackpot game, "HIT02" is displayed as the HIT display. Display characters such as. However, in this example, when the 16R probability variation big hit is controlled in the 16th round, the opening control similar to the small hit game is performed, so when the 15th round is reached, the 15th round and the 16th round are reached. At the start of, a character display such as "HIT MAX" is displayed in common, and it is displayed as if the final round has been reached.

In this example, as described above, if the number of small hits is displayed as a HIT display during the second KT state, the same effect as during the second KT state is produced by displaying the number of rounds in a pseudo HIT display. It is designed to be an aspect. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the pseudo second KT effect (step 006IWS9811). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9815.

If the first pattern flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the round to be started this time is the 16th round (step 006IWS9812). Whether or not it is the 16th round can be determined, for example, by checking the number of rounds set in the received large winning opening opening display command. If it is not the 16th round (that is, if it is the 1st round to the 15th round), the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the effect during the normal round (step 006IWS9813). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9815. In the 16th round, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the pseudo second KT effect (step 006IWS9814). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9815.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 006IWS9815), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (as an effect component). The image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) are controlled (step 006IWS9816). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set large winning opening opening flag.

If the display command is received after the large winning opening is opened (Y in step 006IWS9802), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9817). If the first pattern flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the pseudo second KT effect (step 006IWS9818). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9827.

If the first pattern flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the round to be started this time is the 15th round (step 006IWS9819). Whether or not it is the 15th round can be determined, for example, by checking the number of rounds set in the received display command after opening the large winning opening. In the fifteenth round, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the second KT transition effect that notifies the transition to the second KT state (step 006IWS9820). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9827.

If it is not the 15th round, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the round to be started this time is the 16th round (step 006IWS9821). Whether or not it is the 16th round can be determined, for example, by checking the number of rounds set in the received display command after opening the large winning opening. If it is not the 16th round (that is, if it is the 1st round to the 14th round), the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the normal interval effect (step 006IWS9822). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9827. In the 16th round, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process data for the pseudo second KT effect (step 006IWS9823).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the standby flag is set (step 006IWS9824). If the waiting flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to display a count display of 100 times (display indicating that the remaining number of times in the high base state is 100 times) (step 006IWS9825). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets “100” to the high base number counter (step 006IWS9826). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9827.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 006IWS9827), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (as an effect component). The image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) are controlled (step 006IWS9828). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set flag after opening the large winning opening.

If the jackpot end designation command is received (Y in step 006IWS9801), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot is terminated this time (step 006IWS9829). Whether or not the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot is terminated can be determined, for example, by storing the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the normal ending effect (step 006IWS9830). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9835.

When ending the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the pseudo second KT effect (step 006IWS9831). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the standby flag is set (step 006IWS9832). If the waiting flag is not set (in this case, the display of the count display 100 times should have started in step 006IWS9825), the effect control CPU 120 has the residual high base state in the image display device 5. Control is performed to superimpose and display the waiting display indicating that the number of times is being waited for on the displayed count display (step 006IWS9833). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the standby flag (step 006IWS9834). Then, the process proceeds to step 006IWS9835.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 006IWS9835), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 006IWS9836). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 006IWS9837). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 006IWS9838), and ends the jackpot middle effect process.

(Ending production processing)
9-51 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 006IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot effect process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 006IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 006IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 006IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 006IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed. However, when executing the pseudo second KT effect, the same effect as in the second KT state is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 006IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step 006IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 006IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step). 006IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 006IWS959).

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS958 to S959, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. The prize ball number display is erased at the end of the game, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is a jackpot game based on the 4R probability variation jackpot (step 006IWS960). Whether or not it is a 4R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. If it is a 4R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 006IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 006IWS962).

By executing the process of steps 006IWS960 to S962, in this example, when the big hit game based on the 4R probability variation big hit is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the big hit game (however, however). In this example, if the prize ball number display is displayed before the 4R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed but the display is not updated), and the high probability after the big hit game is completed. / During the 2nd KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is a jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot A (step 006IWS963). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot A is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. If it is not the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears 0) the value of the fluctuation count counter (step 006IWS964) and resets (clears 0) the value of the small hit counter (step 006IWS964). Step 006IWS965).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the standby flag is set (step 006IWS966). If the standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the standby display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 006IWS967) and resets the standby flag (step 006IWS968). ..

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS963 to S968, in this example, the fluctuation count counter and the small hit counter are reset when the second KT state is terminated as a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot A. Then, the display of the waiting display ends, and the subtraction display of the count display starts.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first pattern flag if it is set (step 006IWS969). After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 006IWS970).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 006IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 9-52 (A), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is determined in FIG. 9-52 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-52 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 006IW001,006IW002,006IW003 is displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (B1), it is set by displaying a predetermined character image 006IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 006IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 006IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-52, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 006IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-53 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-53 (B1) and 9-53 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined effect image 006IW005,006IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed as a predetermined effect image 006IW005,006IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 006IW005 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B2), a predetermined effect image 006IW005 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 9-54 and 9-55 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 9-54 and 9-55, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-54 and 9-55, there is a case where the jackpot game state is controlled based on the 16R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 9-54 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 006IW008 is displayed. In addition, when a normal prize (a prize that is not an over prize) occurs in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 9-54 (B). 006IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 006IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (C), the winning display 006IW010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L. , 8R outputs a winning sound according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 006IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (D), the character display 006IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 006IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 displays "555". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect C, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), when the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game is completed. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 006IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won in the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 9-55. As shown in (F), the winning display 006IW012 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 006IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is produced based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (G), the winning display 006IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 006IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state and the number of prize balls reaches 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (H), the character display 006IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 006IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-54 and 9-55, although not shown, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. In that case, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER", and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability / second KT state). Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios according to the total of the game values given by the above, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are different at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the effect mode in the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will be described. FIG. 9-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode in the second KT state. In this example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs and the game shifts to the second KT state after the jackpot game ends, the second KT transition effect is executed during the interval period after the 15th round of the jackpot game (see step 006IWS9820). ), The jackpot game is still in progress when the 16th round is entered, but as shown in FIG. 9-56 (A), the same effect as in the second KT state is executed (see step 006IWS9814). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (A), in the image display device 5, characters such as "small hit RUSH in progress" are displayed, and a predetermined character image 006IW101 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (A), the image display device 5 displays the count display 006IW102 100 times (see step 006IW9825), and then counts as shown in FIG. 9-56 (B). The standby display 006IW103 is superimposed and displayed on the display 006IW102 (see step 006IWS9833). Then, while the second KT state continues, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (B), characters such as "small hit RUSH in progress" and the character image 006IW101 are continuously displayed, and the standby display 006IW103 is superimposed. The display continues. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (B), it is assumed that the image display device 5 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol during the second KT state.

Next, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (C), at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5, a small hit symbol is displayed on the left, middle, and right. The combination of symbols whose symbols are special symbols (for example, star symbols) 006IW104 is displayed in a reduced size. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (C), a HIT display 006IW105 indicating the number of small hits generated in the second KT state is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 9-56 (C), the case where the eighth small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown, and the case where the character display of "HIT08" is displayed as the HIT display 006IW105 is shown. ing.

Next, when a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT state is terminated, the standby display 006IW103 is erased (see step 006IWS967) 100 times as shown in FIG. 9-56 (D). The count display 006IW102 of the above becomes visible again. In this case, for example, an effect such that the standby display 006IW103 explodes and disappears or gradually fades out is executed, and the 100-time count display 006IW102 becomes visible again.

After that, the count display 006IW102 is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and when the value of the high base count counter becomes 0, the count display 006IW102 is deleted from the image display device 5. In this example, the gaming states after the end of the second KT state include high probability / first KT state and low probability / first KT state, but high probability / first KT state and low probability / first KT. Regardless of the state, the count display 006IW102 is subtracted and displayed one by one. Then, in the case of the low probability / first KT state, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed, the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered. Therefore, when the count display 006IW102 is finished, the background according to the normal state is reached. It changes to an image. On the other hand, in the case of the low probability / first KT state, even if the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished and the count display 006IW102 is finished, the high probability / first KT state is continued and the background image does not change. / It will be confirmed that it is in the first KT state.

Next, an effect mode of the big hit medium effect (normal big hit medium effect) by the second pattern will be described. FIG. 9-57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the big hit medium effect by the second pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-57 (A), when the variable display that becomes a big hit is finished, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B), the image display device 5 starts displaying the right-handed notification 006IW106 in the normal mode (see step 006IWS9712). Next, when 10 seconds have passed since the jackpot symbol was derived and displayed, the display of the gate passage promotion display 006IW107 is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-57 (C) (see step 006IWS9716). .. Then, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 006IW041 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (D), the normal big hit middle effect is started.

Next, an effect mode of the big hit medium effect by the first pattern will be described. FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the big hit medium effect by the first pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-58 (A), it is assumed that a big hit occurs during the second KT state, and the first pattern is determined as the effect pattern during the big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (B), the jackpot symbol is not displayed, and the image display device 5 starts displaying the right-handed notification 006IW108 in the reduced mode (see step 006IWS9713). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (C), unlike the second pattern, the gate passage promotion display 006IW107 is not displayed even after 10 seconds have passed from the end of the jackpot fluctuation.

Next, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 006IW041 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (D), character display such as "small hit RUSH in" similar to that in the second KT state is displayed. The display of the character image 006IW101 is continued, and the same effect as in the second KT state is executed. Further, when the round is started, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (D), a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) pseudo-similar to the small hit symbol is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. ) 006IW109 is displayed, and the same HIT display 006IW110 as in the second KT state is displayed. However, while the HIT display 006IW105 is displayed indicating the number of small hits during the second KT state, the HIT display 006IW110 is displayed indicating the number of rounds in the large hit medium effect according to the first pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 9-58, in the big hit middle effect by the first pattern, the same effect as in the second KT state shown in FIG. 9-56 is executed.

The effect in the second KT state is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when an effect of outputting a predetermined music sound is executed during the second KT state and an effect during a big hit by the first pattern is executed, the music is taken over and output as a sound even during the big hit game. May be good. Any production that reminds us of being in the second KT state (small hit RUSH) in some form may be sufficient.

Next, the execution timing of the effect in the big hit medium effect by the second pattern will be described. FIG. 9-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the effect in the big hit medium effect according to the second pattern. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-59, a case where a big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit is executed is shown. As shown in FIGS. 9-59, in the first round to the fifteenth round during the big hit game, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is controlled to be in the open state for 30 seconds. Further, in the first to fifteenth rounds, the image display device 5 executes a normal jackpot effect.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-59, during the interval period after the end of the 15th round, the second KT transition effect is executed on the image display device 5 (see step 006IWS9820).

Next, in the 16th round, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is executed three times for a short opening (3 seconds) of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), and the opening target is the special variable winning ball. Although the device 7 (large winning opening) and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) are different, open control similar to a small hit is executed. In the 16th round and the ending period, as shown in FIGS. 9-59, a pseudo second KT effect is executed, and although the jackpot game is still in progress, the same effect as in the second KT state is executed, and the second KT state has already been performed. The effect as if the transition to (step 006IWS9814, S9823, S9831) is executed.

After that, when the big hit game is finished and the state shifts to the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-59, the image display device 5 executes the effect during the second KT state, and when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is opened for 3 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 9-59, in this example, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is reached, the effect shifts from the normal jackpot medium effect to the second KT transition effect and the pseudo second KT effect, and then to the effect in the second KT state. , It is possible to seamlessly shift to the second KT state, and the production can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example 1)
In the present feature unit 006IW, a case is shown in which it is determined whether to use the jackpot medium effect pattern as the first pattern or the second pattern based on the number of times the variation display is executed in the second KT state. Not limited. For example, in the big hit game executed last time, the current big hit middle effect pattern may be determined based on which of the first pattern and the second big hit medium effect pattern was used to execute the big hit medium effect. Good. Hereinafter, a modification 1 in which the current jackpot effect pattern is determined based on the previous jackpot effect pattern will be described.

FIG. 9-60 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect pattern setting process (step 006IWS922) in the first modification. In the above-mentioned feature unit 006IW, the case where the first pattern flag is reset in the ending effect processing when the big hit game is finished is shown (see step 006IWS969), but in the modified example 1, the first pattern is shown at the end of the big hit game. The flag shall not be reset.

In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS501). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is a big hit (step 006IWS503). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot fluctuation can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area.

If it is a big hit fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the first pattern number counter for counting the number of times that the first pattern is continuously determined as the big hit medium effect pattern is 5 or more. (Step 006IWS503A). If the value of the first pattern number counter is 5 or more, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly determines the second pattern as the effect pattern during the big hit (step 006IWS503B). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first pattern flag (step 006IWS503C) and resets the value of the first pattern count counter (clears 0) (step 006IWS503D).

In the first modification, the processing of steps 006IWS503A to S503D is executed, and when the first pattern is continuously determined five times or more, the second pattern is forcibly determined. There is.

If the value of the first pattern number counter is not 5 or more, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS504A). If the first pattern flag is set (that is, when the first pattern is determined last time), the effect control CPU 120 uses the jackpot middle effect pattern determination table K as a table for determining the jackpot medium effect pattern. Is selected (step 006IWS504B). On the other hand, if the first pattern flag is not set (that is, when the second pattern is determined last time), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern during the jackpot as a table for determining the effect pattern during the jackpot. Select table L (step 006IWS504C). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected jackpot effect pattern determination table, and determines the jackpot effect pattern (step 006IWS505).

FIG. 9-61 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the big hit medium effect pattern determination table in the first modification. Of these, FIG. 9-61 (1) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table K selected in step 006IWS504B. Further, FIG. 9-61 (2) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table L selected in step 006IWS504C.

As shown in FIG. 9-61 (1), when the first pattern is determined last time, the first pattern is determined with a probability of 30% and the second pattern is determined with a probability of 70% as the effect pattern during the big hit. It is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (2), when the second pattern is determined last time, the first pattern is determined with a probability of 70% and the second pattern is determined with a probability of 30% as the effect pattern during the big hit. The pattern is determined. Therefore, in the first modification, when the first pattern is determined last time, the ratio of determining the second pattern as the effect pattern during the current jackpot is increased, and when the second pattern is determined last time, the jackpot this time is determined. It is configured to increase the ratio of determining the first pattern as the medium effect pattern.

When the first pattern is determined as the big hit medium effect pattern (Y in step 006IWS506). The effect control CPU 120 sets the first pattern flag (step 006IWS507). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first pattern number counter (step 006IWS507A). On the other hand, when the second pattern is determined as the effect pattern during the big hit (N in step 006IWS506). The first pattern flag is reset (step 006IWS507B), and the value of the first pattern count counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 006IWS507C).

(Modification 2)
Further, the effect pattern during the big hit may be determined based on the number of prize balls obtained in the second KT state. Hereinafter, a modified example 2 in which the effect pattern during the big hit is determined based on the number of prize balls obtained in the second KT state will be described.

FIG. 9-62 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect pattern setting process (step 006IWS922) in the second modification. In the second modification, the prize ball counter counts the number of prize balls after shifting to the second KT state, and becomes a big hit other than the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot A, and becomes the second KT state. Shall be reset when exiting.

In the second modification, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS501). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is a big hit (step 006IWS503). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot fluctuation can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If the jackpot fluctuates, the effect control CPU 120 selects a jackpot effect pattern determination table according to the value of the prize ball counter as a table for determining the effect pattern during the jackpot game (big hit medium effect pattern). (Step 006IWS504D). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected jackpot effect pattern determination table, and determines the jackpot effect pattern (step 006IWS505).

FIG. 9-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the big hit medium effect pattern determination table in the second modification.

FIG. 9-63 (1) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table M selected when the value of the prize ball counter is less than 200. As shown in FIG. 9-63 (1), when the number of prize balls after being controlled to the second KT state is less than 200, the first pattern is determined with a probability of 90% as the big hit medium effect pattern. Then, the second pattern is determined with a probability of 10%.

FIG. 9-63 (2) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table N selected when the value of the prize ball counter is 200 or more and less than 400. As shown in FIG. 9-63 (2), when the number of prize balls after being controlled to the second KT state is 200 or more and less than 400, there is a 70% probability that the jackpot medium effect pattern will be the first. One pattern is determined, and there is a 30% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-63 (3) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table O selected when the value of the prize ball counter is 400 or more and less than 600. As shown in FIG. 9-63 (3), when the number of prize balls after being controlled in the second KT state is 400 or more and less than 600, there is a 50% probability that the jackpot medium effect pattern will be the first. One pattern is determined and the second pattern is determined with a 50% probability.

FIG. 9-63 (4) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table P selected when the value of the prize ball counter is 600 or more and less than 800. As shown in FIG. 9-63 (4), when the number of prize balls after being controlled in the second KT state is 600 or more and less than 800, there is a 30% probability that the jackpot medium effect pattern will be the first. One pattern is determined, and there is a 70% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-63 (5) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table Q selected when the value of the prize ball counter is 800 or more and less than 1000. As shown in FIG. 9-63 (5), when the number of prize balls after being controlled in the second KT state is 800 or more and less than 1000 times, there is a 10% probability that the jackpot medium effect pattern will be the first. One pattern is determined, and there is a 90% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-63 (6) shows a specific example of the jackpot medium effect pattern determination table R selected when the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or more. As shown in FIG. 9-63 (6), when the number of prize balls after being controlled to the second KT state is 1000 or more, the second pattern is determined with a 100% probability as the big hit middle effect pattern. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 9-63, in the second modification, the smaller the number of prize balls from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot game state, the higher the ratio of determining the first pattern, and the second KT. The larger the number of prize balls from the transition to the state to the control of the jackpot game state, the higher the ratio of determining the second pattern. With such a configuration, in this example, when the game value (number of prize balls) obtained by the small hit after the transition to the second KT state is small, it is difficult to recognize that it is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the regret that the profit that should have been obtained in the second KT state (small hit RUSH) could not be obtained.

In the second modification, the processes of steps 006IWS506 and S507 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-40.

(Modification 3)
Further, the effect pattern during the big hit may be determined based on the number of small hits generated in the second KT state. Hereinafter, a modified example 3 in which the effect pattern during the big hit is determined based on the number of small hits generated in the second KT state will be described.

FIG. 9-64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect pattern setting process (step 006IWS922) in the modified example 3.

In the third modification, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 006IWS501). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is a big hit (step 006IWS503). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot fluctuation can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If the jackpot fluctuates, the effect control CPU 120 selects a jackpot medium effect pattern determination table according to the value of the small hit count counter as a table for determining the effect pattern during the jackpot game (big hit medium effect pattern). (Step 006IWS504E). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected jackpot effect pattern determination table, and determines the jackpot effect pattern (step 006IWS505).

9-65 and 9-66 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect pattern determination table during the big hit in the modified example 3.

FIG. 9-65 (1) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XA selected when the value of the small hit count counter is less than 5. As shown in FIG. 9-65 (1), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is less than 5, the first pattern is determined with a probability of 90% as the large hit medium effect pattern. Then, the second pattern is determined with a probability of 10%.

FIG. 9-65 (2) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XB selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 5 or more and less than 10. As shown in FIG. 9-65 (2), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 5 times or more and less than 10 times, there is a probability of 80% as a large hit medium effect pattern. One pattern is determined, and there is a 20% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-65 (3) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XC selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 10 or more and less than 15. As shown in FIG. 9-65 (3), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 10 times or more and less than 15 times, there is a 70% probability that the large hit medium effect pattern will occur. One pattern is determined, and the second pattern is determined with a 30% probability.

FIG. 9-65 (4) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XD selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 15 or more and less than 20. As shown in FIG. 9-65 (4), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 15 times or more and less than 20 times, there is a 60% probability that the large hit medium effect pattern will occur. One pattern is determined, and there is a 40% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-65 (5) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XE selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 20 or more and less than 25. As shown in FIG. 9-65 (5), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 20 times or more and less than 25 times, there is a 50% probability that the effect pattern during the big hit is the first. One pattern is determined, and there is a 50% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-65 (6) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XF selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 25 or more and less than 30. As shown in FIG. 9-65 (6), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 25 times or more and less than 30 times, there is a 40% probability that the large hit medium effect pattern will be performed. One pattern is determined, and there is a 60% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-66 (7) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XG selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 30 or more and less than 35. As shown in FIG. 9-66 (7), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 30 times or more and less than 35 times, there is a 30% probability that the large hit medium effect pattern is used. One pattern is determined, and there is a 70% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-66 (8) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XH selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 35 or more and less than 40. As shown in FIG. 9-66 (8), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 35 times or more and less than 40 times, there is a 20% probability that the large hit medium effect pattern will be the first. One pattern is determined, and the second pattern is determined with an 80% probability.

FIG. 9-66 (9) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XI selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 40 or more and less than 45. As shown in FIG. 9-66 (9), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 40 times or more and less than 45 times, there is a 10% probability that the large hit medium effect pattern will occur. One pattern is determined, and there is a 90% chance that the second pattern will be determined.

FIG. 9-66 (10) shows a specific example of the large hit medium effect pattern determination table XJ selected when the value of the small hit count counter is 45 or more. As shown in FIG. 9-66 (10), when the number of small hits after being controlled to the second KT state is 45 or more, the second pattern is determined with a 100% probability as the large hit medium effect pattern. Will be done.

As shown in FIGS. 9-65 and 9-66, in the second modification, the smaller the number of small hits after the transition to the second KT state, the higher the rate of determining the first pattern, and the transition to the second KT state. It is configured so that the higher the number of small hits after that, the higher the ratio of determining the second pattern. With such a configuration, in this example, when the number of small hits after the transition to the second KT state is small and the game value obtained by the small hit is small, it is difficult to recognize that it is a big hit. , It is possible to reduce the disappointment that the profit that should have been obtained in the second KT state (small hit RUSH) could not be obtained.

In the third modification, the processes of steps 006IWS506 and S507 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-40.

(Modification example 4)
In the present feature unit 006IW, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, the case where the gate passage promotion display is not displayed at all is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, it may be configured to display the gate passage promotion display in an inconspicuous mode (for example, a reduced mode). Hereinafter, a modified example 4 for displaying the gate passage promotion display in an inconspicuous mode (for example, a reduced mode) when the jackpot middle effect by the first pattern is executed will be described.

FIG. 9-67 is a flowchart showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the modified example 4. In the modified example 4, the processes of steps 006IWS9701 to S9714 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-47.

In the modified example 4, if the elapsed period from the derivation and display of the jackpot symbol is 10 seconds (Y in step 006IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set. (Step 006IWS9715). If the first pattern flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the normal gate passage promotion display (step 006IWS9716). If the first pattern flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the gate passage promotion display in the reduced mode (step 006IWS9716A).

In the modified example 4, the processes after step 006IWS9717 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-48.

FIG. 9-68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the big hit middle effect according to the first pattern in the modified example 4. As shown in FIG. 9-68 (A), it is assumed that a big hit occurs during the second KT state, and the first pattern is determined as the effect pattern during the big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (B), the jackpot symbol is not displayed, and the image display device 5 starts displaying the right-handed notification 006IW108 in the reduced mode (see step 006IWS9713). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (C), unlike the second pattern, when 10 seconds have passed from the end of the jackpot fluctuation, the display of the gate passage promotion display 006IW111 in the reduced mode is started (see step 006IWS9716A). ..

The mode of production after the start of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 9-68 (D) is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 9-58 (D).

(Modification 5)
Further, for example, the gate passage promotion display may be displayed at different timings depending on whether the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed or the big hit middle effect by the second pattern is executed. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which the gate passage promotion display is displayed at different timings will be described depending on whether the jackpot effect is executed by the first pattern or the jackpot effect is executed by the second pattern.

FIG. 9-69 is a flowchart showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processes of steps 006IWS9701 to S9713 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-47.

If the right-handed notification is being displayed (Y in step 006IWS9710), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first pattern flag is set (step 006IWS9714A). If the first pattern flag is not set (when executing the big hit medium effect by the second pattern (N in step 006IWS9714A)), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the value of the period measurement timer after the big hit display. , It is confirmed whether or not the elapsed period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol is 10 seconds (step 006IWS9714B). If the elapsed period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol is 10 seconds, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the gate passage promotion display (step 006IWS9716).

On the other hand, if the first pattern flag is set (when executing the big hit medium effect by the first pattern (Y in step 006IWS9714A)), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the period measurement timer after the big hit display. Based on this, it is confirmed whether or not the elapsed period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol is 20 seconds (step 006IWS9714C). If the elapsed period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol is 20 seconds, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the gate passage promotion display (step 006IWS9716).

By executing the processes of steps 006IWS9714A to S9716, in this example, when the big hit middle effect by the second pattern is executed, the gate passage promotion display is displayed 10 seconds after the big hit fluctuation is completed. When it is started and the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, the display of the gate passage promotion display is started after 20 seconds longer than that.

In the modified example 5, the processes after step 006IWS9717 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-48.

(Modification 6)
Further, in the present feature unit 006IW, the right-handed notification in the normal mode is displayed when the big hit middle effect by the second pattern is executed, while the right in the reduced mode is displayed when the big hit medium effect by the first pattern is executed. Although the case of displaying the hit notification is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed, the right-handed notification may not be displayed at all. Hereinafter, a modification 6 in which the right-handed notification is not displayed when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed will be described.

FIG. 9-70 is a flowchart showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the modified example 6. In the modified example 6, if the process of waiting for hitting the special figure does not include the process of step 006IWS9713 shown in FIGS. 9-47 and the first pattern flag is set in step 006IWS9711 (Y of step 006IWS9711), it is for effect control. The CPU 120 ends the waiting process for hitting the special figure as it is. The other processes in the special figure hit waiting process are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-47 and 9-48.

As described above, according to the feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) and is advantageous for the player. Yes, in a special state (eg, second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than in a non-special state (eg, normal state (eg, low probability / low base state)) It is controllable. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, an effect during a big hit) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and when controlled to an advantageous state in a special state, the same or similar effect as in the special state is executed. The effect can be executed by either the first pattern (see FIG. 9-58) or the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57) that executes the effect during the advantageous state that is not executed during the special state. is there. In addition, the effect can be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different ratio depending on the period controlled in the special state before being controlled in the advantageous state (FIG. 9-). 41 and FIGS. 9-42). Therefore, by associating the effect mode in the special state with the effect mode in the advantageous state controlled during the special state, the game interest is improved when the game value is given by the special state in the special state. be able to.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the number of executions of the variable display executed during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is small, the effect is executed by the first pattern at a high rate (for example, FIG. 9). As shown in −41 and FIG. 9-42, the smaller the number of fluctuations from the transition to the second KT state to the control to the jackpot gaming state (the more the number of fluctuations is controlled from the transition to the second KT state to the jackpot gaming state). The shorter the period until), the higher the rate of determining the first pattern). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the special state is controlled but the advantageous state is controlled in a short period of time.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the number of executions of the variable display executed during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is large, the effect is executed by the second pattern at a high rate (for example, FIG. 9). As shown in −41 and FIG. 9-42, the larger the number of fluctuations from the transition to the second KT state to the control to the jackpot gaming state (the more the number of fluctuations is controlled from the transition to the second KT state to the jackpot gaming state). The longer the period is), the higher the rate of determining the second pattern). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the game is controlled to the game state after obtaining a sufficient game value in the special state.

In this example, the number of times the variable display is executed during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is large or small as the "period controlled to the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state". Although the case of deciding whether to use the first pattern or the second pattern is shown according to the above, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to measure the time itself after being controlled to the special state (second KT state), and determine whether to use the first pattern or the second pattern depending on whether the measurement time is long or short. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 006IW, a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed is provided. Further, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, the effect corresponding to the change of the variable device to the first state as the same or similar effect as in the special state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-58 (D)). HIT display 006IW110) can be executed. Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it can be easily pretended to be in a special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 006IW, a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed is provided. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, right-handed notification 006IW106 shown in FIGS. 9-57 (B) and 9-57) that encourages the entry of the game medium into the variable device. Further, the specific effect can be executed when the effect is executed by the second pattern, and the specific effect is not executed when the effect is executed by the first pattern (see FIGS. 9-70 of the modified example 6). Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it can be easily pretended to be in a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a low probability / high base state (first KT state)) which is different from the special state and is more advantageous to the player than the non-special state. Yes, after the special state is finished, it is possible to control the specific state for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the variable display is finished 100 times). Further, when controlled to a special state, after displaying a predetermined display (for example, 100 times count display 006IW102 shown in FIG. 9-56 (A)) in a predetermined mode indicating a predetermined period in advance, the display of the predetermined display. It is possible to execute a change effect for changing the mode to a special mode (for example, an effect of superimposing the waiting display 006IW103 on the count display 006IW102 shown in FIG. 9-56 (B)). Therefore, it is possible to suggest in advance that the special state will be controlled to a specific state for a predetermined period after the end of the special state, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, the standby display 006IW103 is superimposed and displayed as a change effect for changing the display mode of the predetermined display to a special mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, an effect of superimposing a character display such as "preparing" may be executed, or an effect of superimposing an image imitating a keyhole may be executed, and various production modes are conceivable.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the special state is terminated, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed from the special mode to the predetermined mode (for example, the standby display 006IW103 shown in FIG. 9-56 (D)). It is possible to execute the effect (effect of making the count display 006IW102 visible again 100 times) by erasing. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the special state is controlled to a specific state for a predetermined period after the end of the special state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, by executing the return effect after executing the change effect, it can be shown as a series of effects from the time when the special state is controlled, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) and which is advantageous for the player, and is a non-special state. (For example, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, an effect during a big hit) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and when controlled to an advantageous state in a special state, the same or similar effect as in the special state is executed. The effect can be executed by either the first pattern (see FIG. 9-58) or the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57) that executes the effect during the advantageous state that is not executed during the special state. is there. In addition, the effect can be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different ratio depending on the history of the information regarding the control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (). (See FIG. 9-61 of Modification 1). Therefore, by associating the effect mode in the special state with the effect mode in the advantageous state controlled during the special state, the game interest is improved when the game value is given by the special state in the special state. be able to.

Further, in this example, since the current big hit middle effect pattern is determined based on whether the previously determined big hit medium effect pattern was the first pattern or the second pattern, the big hit medium effect by the first pattern or the second pattern is used. It is possible to prevent the production from being biased during the big hit. For example, if the effect is excessively biased toward the effect during the big hit by the first pattern, the same effect as during the second KT state will be executed endlessly, so that the big hit will occur endlessly during the second KT state. If not, it may be misleading. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to correct the bias of the effect pattern during the big hit and prevent the misunderstanding that the big hit does not occur endlessly during the second KT state.

In this example, as "history of information about being controlled to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state", it is based on whether the previously determined jackpot middle effect pattern was the first pattern or the second pattern. The case of determining the effect pattern during the big hit this time is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine the production pattern during the big hit this time based on the history of various effects executed during the big hit game, the number of consecutive villas, etc., and in some form, "advantage after being controlled to a special state". It suffices if the effect pattern during the big hit is determined based on the "history of information about being controlled by the state".

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the effect is executed by the second pattern based on the control to the advantageous state last time, the effect is executed by the first pattern at a high rate (for example, of the modification 1). As shown in FIGS. 9-61, when the second pattern was determined last time, the ratio of determining the first pattern as the effect pattern during the big hit this time is high). Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the pattern of the effect executed based on the control in the advantageous state in the special state is excessively biased.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the effect is executed by the first pattern based on the control to the advantageous state last time, the effect is executed by the second pattern at a high rate (for example, of the modification 1). As shown in FIGS. 9-61, when the first pattern was determined last time, the ratio of determining the second pattern as the effect pattern during the big hit this time is high). Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the pattern of the effect executed based on the control in the advantageous state in the special state is excessively biased.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the effect is executed by the first pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) in succession, the effect is executed by the second pattern (see FIG. 9-60 of the modified example 1). ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern of the effect executed based on being controlled in the advantageous state in the special state from being excessively biased to the first pattern, and it is misunderstood that the pattern is not controlled in the advantageous state. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) and which is advantageous for the player, and is a non-special state. (For example, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, an effect during a big hit) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and when controlled to an advantageous state in a special state, the same or similar effect as in the special state is executed. The effect can be executed by either the first pattern (see FIG. 9-58) or the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57) that executes the effect during the advantageous state that is not executed during the special state. is there. In addition, the effect can be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different ratio depending on the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state (modification example). 2). Therefore, by associating the effect mode in the special state with the effect mode in the advantageous state controlled during the special state, the game interest is improved when the game value is given by the special state in the special state. be able to.

Further, for example, when the jackpot middle effect pattern is determined only by the number of fluctuations after the transition to the second KT state, the number of fluctuations when configured so that there is a deviation even during the second KT state. If it is managed only by itself, it will include a period in which the game value (prize ball) cannot be obtained at all due to the loss, and it is not possible to accurately manage the game value and determine the jackpot production pattern. On the other hand, in the second modification of the feature unit 006IW, the game value itself obtained during the second KT state is managed, so that the game value can be managed more strictly and the jackpot production pattern can be determined. ..

In this example, specifically, the game value is given by being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) (15 prize balls are obtained by winning a game ball in the big prize opening). In the special state (for example, the second KT state), the game value is given by being controlled to the special state (for example, the small hit game state) (10 game balls are awarded by winning a prize in the special winning opening). You can get a prize ball). Not limited to such a mode, for example, as a game value given during the special state, a game ball is won in the general prize opening 10 during the second KT state, and three prize balls are obtained. The concept may include the fact that a game ball wins a prize in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening during the second KT state and one prize ball is obtained.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is small, the effect is executed by the first pattern at a high rate (for example, the figure of the modification 2). As shown in 9-63, the smaller the number of prize balls from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot game state, the higher the ratio of determining the first pattern). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the special state is controlled but the advantageous state is controlled in a short period of time.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state is large, the effect is executed by the second pattern at a high rate (for example, the figure of the modification 2). As shown in 9-63, the larger the number of prize balls from the transition to the second KT state to the control of the jackpot game state, the higher the ratio of determining the second pattern). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the game is controlled to the game state after obtaining a sufficient game value in the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) and which is advantageous for the player, and is a non-special state. (For example, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, an effect during a big hit) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and when controlled to an advantageous state in a special state, the same or similar effect as in the special state is executed. The effect can be executed by either the first pattern (see FIG. 9-58) or the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57) that executes the effect during the advantageous state that is not executed during the special state. is there. In addition, the effect can be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different ratio depending on the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state (). See FIGS. 9-65 and 9-66 of Modification 3). Therefore, by associating the effect mode in the special state with the effect mode in the advantageous state controlled during the special state, the game interest is improved when the game value is given by the special state in the special state. be able to.

Further, for example, when the jackpot middle effect pattern is determined only by the number of fluctuations after the transition to the second KT state, the number of fluctuations when configured so that there is a deviation even during the second KT state. If it is managed only by itself, it will include a period in which the game value (prize ball) cannot be obtained at all due to the loss, and it is not possible to accurately manage the game value and determine the jackpot production pattern. On the other hand, in the modified example 2 of the main feature unit 006IW, since the number of small hits generated during the second KT state is managed, the game value can be managed more strictly and the effect pattern during the big hit can be determined.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the number of times controlled to the special state is small during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state, the effect is executed by the first pattern at a high rate (for example, modification 3). As shown in FIGS. 9-65 and 9-66, the smaller the number of small hits after the transition to the second KT state, the higher the ratio of determining the first pattern). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the special state is controlled but the advantageous state is controlled in a short period of time.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the number of times the special state is controlled is large during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state, the effect is executed by the second pattern at a high rate (for example, modification 3). As shown in FIGS. 9-65 and 9-66, the larger the number of small hits after the transition to the second KT state, the higher the ratio of determining the second pattern). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the game is controlled to the game state after obtaining a sufficient game value in the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) and which is advantageous for the player, and is a non-special state. (For example, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a big hit middle effect) based on being controlled in an advantageous state, and a notification effect (for example, a one-shot notification effect) for notifying that the effect is controlled in a special state. It is feasible. In addition, the first pattern (see FIGS. 9-58) that executes the same or similar effect as in the special state when controlled to the advantageous state in the special state, and the effect in the advantageous state that is not executed in the special state. The effect can be executed by any one of the second patterns to be executed (see FIGS. 9-57). Further, the notification effect can be executed when the effect is executed by the second pattern, and the execution of the notification effect is restricted when the effect is executed by the first pattern (see FIGS. 9-43). Therefore, by not notifying that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state when the effect is executed by the first pattern, the effect executed by the first pattern is performed when the game value is given by the special state in the special state. It can be made to stand out and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, the case where the notification effect is a one-shot notification effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the notification effect is a concept including an effect of notifying that the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) in some form, such as stopping and displaying a combination of jackpot symbols.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to execute the notification effect in the non-special state at least when it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, only when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs. One-shot announcement production is possible). Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and it can be easily pretended to be in the special state. In addition, by making the appearance different from the production in the normal advantageous state, it is possible to easily mislead the production.

Further, according to the feature unit 006IW, the execution frequency of the notification effect can be set (see FIGS. 9-36). Further, regardless of the setting, the execution of the notification effect is restricted when the effect is executed by the first pattern (for example, when the big hit middle effect by the first pattern is executed as shown in FIGS. 9-43). If so, it is restricted so that the one-shot notification effect is not uniformly executed regardless of whether the one-shot notification low-frequency mode or the one-shot notification high-frequency mode is used). Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and it can be easily pretended to be in the special state. In addition, by making the appearance different from the production in the normal advantageous state, it is possible to easily mislead the production.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to execute variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative symbol), and the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information becomes a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol). It can be controlled to an advantageous state when Further, when the effect is executed by the second pattern, the specific result can be displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information for the effect (see FIGS. 9-57), and the effect is executed by the first pattern. In addition, when the effect is executed by the first pattern without displaying the specific result as the display result of the variable display of the identification information for the effect (see FIGS. 9-58), it is specially notified that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Notification effect (for example, button effect) can be executed. Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and it can be easily pretended to be in the special state. Further, by using a notification method different from the production by the second pattern, it is possible to make it easier to pretend that the user is not in an advantageous state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 006IW041) (for example, the jackpot game state). (See FIG. 9-20), it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous for the player, and a non-special state (for example, a normal state (for example, low probability)). It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than (/ low base state)). Further, the effect (for example, the effect during the big hit) can be executed based on the control in the advantageous state, and the promotion effect for promoting the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area (for example, FIG. 9-57 (C)). The gate passage promotion display 006IW107) shown in the above can be executed. In addition, the first pattern (see FIGS. 9-58) that executes the same or similar effect as in the special state when controlled to the advantageous state in the special state, and the effect in the advantageous state that is not executed in the special state. The effect can be executed by any one of the second patterns to be executed (see FIGS. 9-57). Further, the promotion effect can be executed when the effect is executed by the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57 (C)), and the promotion effect is not executed when the effect is executed by the first pattern (FIG. 9). -58 (C)). Therefore, by making it difficult to understand that the effect of the first pattern is in the advantageous state, it is possible to improve the game interest when the game value is given by the special state in the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 006IW041) (for example, the jackpot game state). (See FIG. 9-20), it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous for the player, and a non-special state (for example, a normal state (for example, low probability)). It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state (high probability / low base state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than (/ low base state)). Further, the effect (for example, the effect during the big hit) can be executed based on the control in the advantageous state, and the promotion effect for promoting the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area (for example, FIG. 9-57 (C)). The gate passage promotion display 006IW107) shown in the above can be executed. In addition, the first pattern (see FIGS. 9-58) that executes the same or similar effect as in the special state when controlled to the advantageous state in the special state, and the effect in the advantageous state that is not executed in the special state. The effect can be executed by any one of the second patterns to be executed (see FIGS. 9-57). Further, the promotion effect can be executed when the effect is executed by the second pattern (see FIG. 9-57 (C)), and the promotion effect is executed in a mode limited to the case where the effect is executed by the first pattern. (See FIG. 9-68 (C) of Modification 4). Therefore, by making it difficult to understand that the effect of the first pattern is in the advantageous state, it is possible to improve the game interest when the game value is given by the special state in the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the effect is executed by the second pattern, the promotion effect is executed based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the effect is executed by the first pattern. If this is the case, the promotion effect is executed based on the elapse of a specific period (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the predetermined period (see, for example, FIGS. 9-69 of Modification 5). Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and it can be easily pretended to be in the special state. In addition, by making the appearance different from the production in the normal advantageous state, it is possible to easily mislead the production.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, the promotion effect is executed in a mode that is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (C) in the modified example 4). The gate passage promotion display 006IW111 in the reduced mode is displayed). Therefore, when the effect is executed by the first pattern, it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and it can be easily pretended to be in the special state. In addition, by making the appearance different from the production in the normal advantageous state, it is possible to easily mislead the production.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the special winning opening). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, since the winning frequency to the special winning opening is particularly high during the small hit RUSH, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a small hit prize suggestion effect) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, as a specific area, a setting suggestion effect may be executed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, or a large winning opening. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be made feasible based on the entry of the game ball into the out port. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be enabled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passing gate 006IW041 as a specific area.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIGS. 9-33). As shown in the above, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 The prize ball number display suggestion effect D can be executed with a% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed with a 3% probability, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number is reached, there is a 2% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 as "the length of the period controlled by the special state" (in other words, The case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed in the period until a certain game value is given) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is controlled to the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period to be used, or it may be the total length of these periods.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game is, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state are used. Depending on the situation, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Is conceivable.

In general, in a game machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXXXXX OVER" is displayed, "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasis effect shown in this example or It is displayed in units that are limited to some extent, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as displaying "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the generation timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to this feature unit 006IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during a high probability / second KT state, and a game ball wins a special prize opening. Based on what you have done, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit.

Further, according to the feature unit 006IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled in an advantageous state and when the special state is controlled. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-entry non-easy state (for example, a closed state). Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, which is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the large prize opening or the special prize opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the opening effect is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It suffices as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 006IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state in the special state, the total of the game values given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times of executing the variable display in the special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, prizes with different selection ratios depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. The ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. , The prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of executing the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, as special states, an advantageous special state (for example, a second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, a first KT state) which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Is controllable. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit is made and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, a case is shown in which a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when a game ball wins a special prize opening during the second KT state. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. Depending on whether the prize is won or the game ball is won in the special prize opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed at a low rate. It may be configured to run.

Further, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs and the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered, the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) may be set as one section and the big hit game immediately before the section may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in this feature unit 006IW, as a "setting suggestion effect", a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect is performed in a manner in which the current set value suggests one of the set values "1" to "6". Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the set value when the power is turned on to the game machine. Good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-53) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 006IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the variable display display result. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-52) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special state control means that can control a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player,
A special state control means capable of controlling a special state, which is more frequently controlled by the special state than a non-special state,
It is provided with an advantageous state corresponding effect executing means capable of executing the effect based on being controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state response effect execution means
A first pattern that executes the same or similar effect as in the special state when controlled to the advantageous state in the special state, and a second pattern that executes an effect in the advantageous state that is not executed in the special state. The production can be performed by any of the patterns of
The effect can be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different ratio depending on the game value given during the special state before being controlled to the advantageous state. A game machine featuring.

Images